Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. 1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. fixtures. and piping. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing fixtures. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. electrical. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. 3 . Germany. such as duct. Add basic MEP elements. such as mechanical equipment. electrical panels. Add more detailed modelling elements. and plumbing engineering workflows. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.

For example. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Create detail views. annotations. On the Contents tab. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Metric: files for users working with metric units. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you can choose to save your work.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. So. you learn where the training files are located. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. when you add ductwork. NOTE Depending on your installation. In this exercise. views. and tags. For example. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. You do not design entire systems. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Create schedules. is located and accessed in the training files location. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. however. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. When you install the training files as instructed. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. However. such as templates and families. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. and sheets to document the project. When you open a training file. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. After completing each exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. templates. as well as how to open and save them. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. to provide a richer and more finished design. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects.

and click the Training Files icon. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. enter the new file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. verify that Project Files (*. and you can open any supported file type. a list of file types displays. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Accessing Training Files | 5 . click ➤ Save As. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. 4 Click the training file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. the Open dialog displays. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click Open. You may close the file with or without saving changes. scroll down. For Files of type. 3 In the right pane. For example.rvt and make changes. and click Save. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For File name. you are prompted to save the changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. if you open settings. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 8 If you have made changes.rvt) is selected. double-click Imperial or Metric.rvt. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. select the folder in which to save the new file. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.

6 .

drawing sheets. quantities. and schedules required for a building project. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the parameter is one of association or connection. every drawing sheet. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If the length of the elevation is changed.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . the door retains this relationship to the partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You learn the terminology. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 2D and 3D view. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In the Revit MEP model. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the operation of the software is parametric. schedules. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and phases when you need it. the floor or roof remains connected. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. scope. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and plans. drawings. the hierarchy of elements. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. hence. sections.

without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and electrical panels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. sprinklers. sinks. For example. sinks. and electrical panels. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. They display in relevant views of the design. dimensions. tags. For example. grids. They help to describe or document the design. filled regions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. For example. and 2D detail components. When you change something. levels.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. ducts. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. boilers. walls and ceilings are hosts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . boilers. sprinklers. Datum elements help to define project context. tags. For example. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Examples include detail lines.

you must be in a section or elevation view. section views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and types. from geometry to construction data. first floor. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. such as roofs. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. top of wall. By using a single project file. In other cases. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. for example. you can explicitly control them. and ceilings. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. However. Project: In Revit MEP. This information includes components used to design the model. North . or bottom of foundation. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Most often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. programming is not required. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. elevation views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. families. The project file contains all information for the building design. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. and drawings of the design. and so forth). floors. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. For example. To place levels. If you can draw. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. In Revit MEP. schedules. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Often. views of the project.

You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. identical use. Type: Each family can have several types. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. For example. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. A type can also be a style. and similar graphical representation. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. A type can be a specific size of a family. System families can be transferred between projects. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and wires. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Unlike system and standard component families. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. showing. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families include ducts.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). hiding. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. With a few clicks. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. pipes. However. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Then experiment with them. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can also display several project views at one time. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.

project and system parameters. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. data and systems. and CAD files. and settings. then select what you want to modify. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. architect-specific tools. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and for switching views. tools used for editing existing elements.

Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays frequently used tools. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. provides access to common tools. For example.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides requested information. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. when adding duct. To keep a panel expanded. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . By default. closes the application menu (double-click).

. select a file to open. (Open) save the current drawing.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save As) export the current drawing. click. such as Export and Publish. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Export) On the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a template and create a new drawing.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.

and Walkthrough. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. click.. or template file.On the application menu.. (Print) access product and license information. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. saves a current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. but is not enabled by default. To enable or disable a tool item. (Licensing) close the file. annotation. provides views including Default 3D. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. or template file. (Publish) print the current drawing. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. annotation. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. Camera.. publish the current project.

When you are using a command. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. To show the Status Bar again. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. repeat the command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. when you switch to another editing mode. or the Family Editor. Starting with the most recent command. check the Status Bar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. When you are highlighting an element or component. Modify. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. This displays the command history in a list. Clear the Status Bar check mark. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). workshared components.To undo or redo a series of operations. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. displaying the same information. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. However. In addition. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Group. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. To hide the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Clipboard.

Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. select one or more elements of the same category. for example. To change existing elements to a different type. On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Modify). When you place an element in a drawing.To cancel or exit the current command. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 1 Click ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Zoom the view In the tutorials. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. In the following steps. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.rvt. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.

SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. on the Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Modifying the View | 19 . 6 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. the view zooms in on the selected area. In the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click . and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. To modify or add snap increments. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.

14 To exit the wheel. moving the wheel to the desired location.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. and then using the Zoom tool again. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press ESC. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Click and drag to orbit the design. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. As you move the mouse. and click tin the Options dialog. For more information about SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click the SteeringWheels tab. ➤ Options.

Performing Common Tasks | 21 .Design. After you are familiar with these tasks. Small blue dots. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and open Level 2 . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Similar controls. referred to as shape handles. bottoms. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and select the duct. as shown. display along the ends. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. These are the drag controls. 2 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. called drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.

3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. In this example. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. or press CTRL+Z. select the first item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 10 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. such as Move and Copy.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click to specify the starting position. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. you want to move the duct. and drag it to the left as shown. After selecting the element to move.

(Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 To end a command. For example.Return. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Click OK. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 14 Enter VG. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.End a command Some commands. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Press ESC twice. Select Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.Supply. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

and loadable families. you learn how to start a project from a template. and geometry from the starting template. under Template file. such as the default project units and settings. click Training files. system families. click Browse. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. select Project. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You can choose from several templates. You can either select a template from the template library. In that case. link files. such as coordination review and interference checking. under Create new. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. settings. 27 . Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. the default building levels and standard views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click Open.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. create and manage views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools.rte template. 6 Click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as ducts and pipes. Finally. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 2 In the New Project dialog. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. New projects inherit all the families. and modify system settings. use copy/monitor.

8 In the drawing area. Click OK. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ For Building Construction. select Project template. For example. and open North. click Browse. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Level 1. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. NH. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. select Manchester. ■ ■ Under Create new. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.rte template and click Open. select School or University. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). for Energy Data. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. under Energy Analysis. Click OK twice. When you select the material. navigate to Imperial Templates. 10 Using the same method. (Browse). 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. For Location. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. create another new project using the Construction template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. for City. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can select it now. If you want to use a template other than the default. Click Cancel. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. In the Choose Template dialog. click (Browse). review the construction materials listed.7 In the Project Browser. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click Edit.

wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Click OK twice. 11 1/2". 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 26 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 22 In the right pane. click Rectangular. for 3 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. for 3 1/2". 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and 12 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and 5 1/2". click Sizes. click Wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems. under Pipe Settings.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 24 In the right pane. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . plumbing. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 23 In the left pane. For Categories. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. and fire protection systems. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 25 In the left pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 4 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 33 Click OK. power distribution systems. 5 1/2".rfa and click Open.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 10 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Round. piping. 27 Click OK. select Views. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". select Identity Data. for 3/4". under Duct Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Family and Type. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 2 In the New Project dialog. select Sub-Discipline. Linking Projects In this exercise. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 4 In the New Project dialog. sheets. Notice that the file is saved as a template. families. select Project. 5 Click OK. In addition. Select Ascending Click OK twice. To enable this coordination. For Then by.Origin to Origin. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. For Sort by.rvt. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. click Training. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 38 Close the file. select Auto . click Browse. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select View Name. For Then by. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Click Open. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. under Template file. and groups that are contained in a project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. under Create new. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. From the Positioning list. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. select Associated Level.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click the My Library icon. or families. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Load. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click OK twice. click (Add Value).11 In the Places dialog. templates. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library. Save. and click (Browse). and change the name to My Library. and click Open. ➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name. and select it as the library path.

7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Edit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. If you work in a large office. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. view the current path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 3 Under Settings. click Places. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 20 Click ➤ Options. and decal image files. click the Spelling tab. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. custom color files. 27 Click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. This path is determined during installation. specify the new location here. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 21 On the File Locations tab. 11 In the Options dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. If you want to relocate this path. select Ignore words in uppercase. enter sheetmtl-Cu. such as bump maps. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click OK. 22 Select My Library. 9 In the text editor.

4 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Edit. 2 In the New Project dialog.rte. and enter 1 .. under Template file. click Close. work with snapping turned off. 22 In the text editor. 23 In the text editor. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Training Files. click OK. under Dimension Snaps. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.17 In the Spelling dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click File menu ➤ Save. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. As you zoom in and out within a view. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 25 Close the file without saving it. 24 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 19 In the Options dialog. click OK. click the Spelling tab. delete sheetmtl-CU. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. you modify snap settings. 20 Under Settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Browse. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap increments. click Restore Defaults. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.

11 Click in the center of the drawing area. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. While sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. enter SM.7 Under Object Snaps. zoom out until it does so. snapping reverts to the system default settings. deselect Chain. 10 On the Options Bar. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . TIP To zoom while sketching. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. If it does not. For example. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. such as ZO to zoom out. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. click OK.

18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Enter SM. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and specify the wall endpoint. with or without saving it. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. it will snap to the endpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall.. and the wall edges. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that snapping is once again active. 26 Close the file. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 25 Click OK. the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .

44 .

you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you first plan the system. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you will understand the process. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. go to http://www. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. At the end of the tutorial. In this exercise. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. water source heat pump (WSHP). Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. As you create the mechanical system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This system consists of a cooling tower. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. However. If the tutorial training files are not present. you first configure the linked architectural model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. 45 . you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. and then you create a plenum level. duct system and a hydronic piping system. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. methodology. By following the recommended workflow.

click Training Files. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. click to select it. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you add a level for plenums. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. roof. not in the MEP training file. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. In this section. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. ceilings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next. and after the linked model highlights. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. select Room Bounding.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding.rvt. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE When working with a linked file. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.

verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 16 Press Esc. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. For Offset. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). The new level is placed. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.MEP. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and double-click West . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Plan View Types. enter 8'. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Verify that Make Plan View is selected.6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and in the Plan View Types dialog. 9 On the Draw panel. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.

NOTE After finishing each exercise. enter an Offset of 1' 0". 20 In the Project Browser. For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. select Plenum Plan. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. ■ Click OK twice. enter 0. for View Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. select MEP . In this exercise. For Sub-Discipline. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. for Level. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Extents. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. and click Properties. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and for Offset. for View Scale. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.Plenum. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Under View Depth. In the next exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. For Cut plane. and then place spaces in various types of areas. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Level Above (Level 3). The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. for Default View Template. you place spaces in areas of the building model. However. Under Identity Data. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select Design. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you can choose to save your work. for Top. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Placing Spaces | 49 . Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select New. walls. For Offset. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. enter 0. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For (Tag Location). This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceilings). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. select Horizontal. For Upper Limit. select Level 2 Plenum. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Space.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). enter 219. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 14 In the drawing area. 9 Select the space. ensuring coordination between the files.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter Library. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. for Number. Click OK. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.7 Click to place the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

enter 0. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 3. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. and then click Modify. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place a space in a large corridor area. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.Space Plan is highlighted. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. enter 0. select Level 3. and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. for Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and for Offset. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.

7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. 10 Using the same method. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. enter Corridor. and scroll to the newly placed space. which was numbered 219Q. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. change the space number to 216A. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 9 In the floor plan. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and press Enter. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. as shown. the plan view would have updated with the changes. double-click the space name. 11 Close the schedule view.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase. click Training Files. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Space Plan is highlighted. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

On the Options Bar.4 Press Esc. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Roof Level. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. enter 225PC. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. for Upper Limit. enter 4'. 6 Enter VG. For Limit Offset. For Offset. enter 0. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. In the plan view. expand Spaces. select the space. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Level 3. Under Identity Data. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. and click Element Properties. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 12 Click in the section view. 10 In the plan view. right-click. enter Chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click OK. click in the chase area to place the space. For Number. for Name. for Upper Limit. select Interior and Reference.

select Space Tag With Volume. ceilings. under Loaded Tags. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Bounding elements (such as walls. All spaces in the view are tagged. 17 Type ZF. floors. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. In the next exercises. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and click OK. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and maximize the view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.

it is automatically added to the Default zone.rvt. click View ➤ Zones. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). you view and verify zones in the System Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. To display space reference lines. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Spaces. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. click Training Files. which removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. After a space is placed in an area.Zoning is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.

you assign spaces to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The graphic in the System Browser updates. and click OK. and click Finish Editing Zone. under Energy Analysis.5 In the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. select Computer Lab 222. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Instruction 221. and Electrical 220 spaces. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise.rvt. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. Using the Edit Zone tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 In the drawing area. under Spaces. Next. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. the Edit Zone tab displays. The Zone tool is active. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and modify the zone properties. click Reference. and a new zone is created. click Training Files. As you do this. double-click 121 Cafeteria. select Occupiable. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone.

you need to activate the zone visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Instruction. Expand HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. select HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Click OK. 5 With the drawing area active. type VG. To view the zone in the drawing area.In the System Browser. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).Zoning.Area B. under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. click Finish Editing Zone. 9 In the System Browser. In this exercise. for Name. and click OK. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. click Training Files. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Spaces. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.West . expand 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.Zoning is highlighted.TIP After you finish editing the zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2 . 11 Close the System Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.West . To display space reference lines.

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning floor plan. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view.Zoning view. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Select Attached End. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 8 In the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc.5 Click in the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". zoom out.Zoning view to activate it.

19 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click Level 1 . 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. enter Lounge . click the corner where the Top.Zoning to make it the active view. double-click the zone tag. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. on the ViewCube. for Name Value. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.rvt.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . space. click Training Files. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. In this exercise. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. and zone information. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser.Zoning view. you verify the building.East. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Front.

and select 109 Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Using the Highlight tool. verify that Wireframe is selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you isolate the space. Next. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . click (Isolate). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Click (Highlight). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

and click OK.■ On the Details tab. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. the space information displays for the selected space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. scroll down in the left pane. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Electrical Loads. select 109 Lounge. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. click . select Lounge/Recreation. and in the People dialog. and then click OK. and then click OK. click . verify that <Building> is selected. select 1_South_Lounge. Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). ■ ■ ■ Next. For Construction Type. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. For People. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.

outdoor air per area. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : 90. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. click (Shading).00 °F : N/A is specified. 12 Using the methods learned previously. cooling air temperature. Next. and air changes per hour. the zone information displays for the selected zone. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. For Cooling Information. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and dehumidification set point. roofs. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.00 °F : 54. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the heating set point. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. verify that 70.00 °F : N/A is specified. and other room-bounding components. Below the list of spaces and zones. and humidification set point. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This indicates the outdoor air per person. floors. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. verify that 74. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. heating air temperature. For Heating Information.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.

68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under Energy Analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 212P. Click OK. Because this is an unoccupied space. click Cancel. for Number. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Level 3. enter 0. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 15 In the Project Browser. select Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Offset. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Name. open MEP .

24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. NH. In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. enter 03101. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ .Space Plan. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Energy Analysis.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. verify that Manchester. for City. click in the Value field. you verified building. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. select School or University. On the Place tab. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. and select space Plenum 212P. For Postal Code. double-click Level 2 . space.rvt. click Edit. and zone information. is selected. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for Energy Data. For Location. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.

for Values. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. select Specified. For Building Construction. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. for Building Service. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and then click . 8 In the drawing area. select Library . In order to select a space. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. select Specified. select space Library 219. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ■ On the Weather tab. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Space Type. for Values. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that New Construction is selected. For People. both. and click Element Properties. For Project Phase. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Condition Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that Level 1 is selected.Audio Visual. select Heated and cooled. and click OK. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. Click OK twice. you need to select this option. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. click in the Value column. enter 200 Btu/h. and click OK. under Volume Computations. For Sliver Space Tolerance. For Sensible. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. right-click. and click OK. Select Area per person. or neither. ft. and enter 50 sq. verify that 1' 0" is specified. a cooling load. For Ground Plane. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Export Complexity. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Latent. enter 150 Btu/h. If. click Edit.

for Values. NH. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Edit. For Location. Select the space associated with the warning. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. There should be no warnings displayed. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and under Heating Information. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. select Actual. For Building Construction. Click OK twice. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and click OK. 12 Click the Details tab. You should correct the space error in the building model. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select 219 Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. for Values. Under Power. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that Manchester. verify that <Building> is specified. click Information). (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. click Calculate. For Electrical Loads. and can be modified here. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that School or University is selected. For Building Service. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. is specified. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. You have verified the building information. Next. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library.

Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. or make any changes to the model. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Color Scheme. space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the drawing area. under Energy Analysis. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. select 219 Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.rvt. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. and a loads report displays. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 19 In the drawing area. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and zone information for the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 17 In the loads report. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. Click OK. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 15 Review the loads report for project. 21 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. space. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. indicating that it’s the active view. select HVAC Zones. In this exercise. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 After you review the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. or zone information. click Training Files. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. weather.Space Plan. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.

under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme displays in the view. select the color scheme legend. and click OK. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .5 Zoom in to the legend. in 1-ton increments. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Click OK. Select Schedule building components. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. For Phase.12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. for Select available fields from. For Name. select Spaces. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.Space Fill is the active view. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. click Training Files. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. more category options are available. enter Space Airflow Schedule. If you select Show categories from all disciplines.rvt. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select New Construction.

select HVAC. Click OK.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. for Formula. For Fields. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Number. For Type. For Discipline. select Level. In the Fields dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Then by. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the Schedule Properties dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. and then click Conditional Format. select Air Flow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Ascending. and then select Hidden field. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Formula. and Blank line. Header. Select Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Level. enter Airflow Delta. and then click . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.■ Under Available fields. enter . select Airflow Delta. select Not Between. click (Browse). and click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.

notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. For Background Color. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Under Conditions to Use. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. verify that Show is highlighted. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In this exercise. select red.■ ■ ■ For Value. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. In the Color dialog. Click OK twice. and click OK. ■ The schedule displays. a view opens that contains the selected space. In the next lesson. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. right-click to access schedule properties. click the color swatch. In later exercises. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.

78 .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. In this lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After completing the air systems lesson. 79 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After system creation. you modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals. you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the ceiling view. indicating that it’s the active view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and scroll to space 223. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. click Training Files.

16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Also. If the host element is modified or moved. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. type 12. and then press Esc to end the command. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then select both Copy and Multiple. for Flow. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and select Supply Diffuser . which in this case is the ceiling grid. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Place on Face. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. select the diffuser.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. enter 425 CFM. and press Enter. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 17 Move the cursor down. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .

navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 24 In the Open dialog. 25 In the drawing area. 22 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and then press Esc. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. click Place on Face. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 21 On the Options Bar. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Next. as shown. 28 On the Placement tab. click Yes.rfa. and click Open. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . As you place the return diffusers. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

select one of the return diffusers. 32 In the Project Browser. as shown. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. for Reference. click Yes. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. Level. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 .Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click to select the lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ For the end point. For the start point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click the Level 1 line.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. enter 9' 0"2750. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. for Constraints ➤ Offset. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 44 Zoom in to space 115.

You then create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and click View ➤ Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. After creating the logical connection. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. When you highlight a space. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. including energy analysis. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. the space crossing lines display. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . right-click the title. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. However. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.Design is highlighted. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In this exercise. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Press Esc.

All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 11 In the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. review the Number of Elements. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. As you add diffusers to systems. On the Options Bar. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 12 In the System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. System Name. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Connect Into. 15 Click Cancel. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and Flow value. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab.

access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Rename the system Next. which updates the name in the System Browser. for Mark. 22 Click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.17 Using the method learned previously. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. the air terminals are the children. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). under Identity Data. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for System Name. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. under Mechanical. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 18 Click OK. and the system connects them. In this exercise.

A Generate Layout tab displays.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the upper left diffuser.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select Network. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.rvt.HVAC Plan. and display solution 1. for Solution Type. click Training Files. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. which provides various layout tools. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In this case. the Network type provides several solutions. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. the space crossing lines display. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Also.

For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Settings. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as shown. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. For Flex Duct Type. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. click Modify. For Offset. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Offset. Select Branch. For Duct Type. Click OK. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.7 On the Options Bar. enter 3'. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.

11 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. as is the elbow itself. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .

The first time you press Tab. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and then click OK. and click to select it. If the entire network does not highlight. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. a disconnection exists. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and click OK. for Color Scheme. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. for Values Displayed. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. highlight a segment of the main duct. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Usually. fittings.Flow. Using a flow-based color scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. under Graphics. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 17 In the Type Properties dialog. but not all values are used in this view. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. select By View.

26 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Airflow. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select the WSHP. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and press Enter. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 20 In the drawing area.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. for Flow.Velocity. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select the color scheme legend. for Schemes. under Mechanical . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and click OK. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . and on the Options Bar. and then press Esc to clear the selection. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .08 in-wg/100ft. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Calculated Size Only. and enter . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select Restrict Height. and select 16". 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and then click to select it. and drag it to the right. select Friction. Select the upper segment of main duct. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Click OK. Under Constraints. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. The ductwork and fittings are updated. click Cancel. for Branch Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. Select Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Use the information that displays (flow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. static pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Using this tool.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 35 Click Finish. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.NOTE As you inspect a system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.rvt. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. also known as the critical path.

6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and click Draw Duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. double-click MEP . click the corner where the Top.3D MEP. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 15 On the ViewCube. Front. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select 9' 10 1/2". select the top right diffuser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .

it is considered a closed loop. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. in space 115. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Using the same method. The ductwork is automatically created. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. the color fill indicates the flow value.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

30 Press Esc twice. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify. and click to select it. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select a segment of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Constraints. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. such as a plenum. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Airflow. and click OK. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click OK.

You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Then. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. In this lesson. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. including 2 base mounted pumps. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping.

including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. in corridor 328. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select WSHP . verify that Wall faces is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Horizontal .HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Tons . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 On the Options Bar.High Efficiency .Left Return .

(Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. and in the Type Selector. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the top edge of the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.8 Click the corridor wall face. 10 Select the WSHP. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and enter 2'.

as shown. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. enter 12 GPM. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Under Mechanical. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Click Modify. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the 2 WSHPs. for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 9'. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.21 Click Modify. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. including flow and pressure.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech 330).Design is highlighted. analyses cannot be performed.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. You can create pipes to connect system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. right-click the Systems column heading. 5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Unlike logical connections (systems). Creating a Piping System | 115 .rvt. but without a corresponding system. click Training Files. and click View ➤ Piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. where it is easier to review the information.

while pressing Ctrl. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Assigning a system component to an existing system. This display indicates that the system is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that on the Options Bar. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. and the Edit System tool is not active. Therefore. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.In the System Browser. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. As you assign equipment to systems. for System Name. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. select the 2 WSHPs. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.HVAC Plan . Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. for System Name. and select the cooling tower. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof . 17 On the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Creating a Piping System | 117 .13 Click Finish Editing System.

24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs.22 In the Select Connector dialog. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click Expand All. In cooling mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 26 Click Finish Editing System. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 28 Using the same method. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and bypasses the cooling tower. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The hydronic supply system highlights in red. indicating the logical connection. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click OK. 25 Select the boiler. 29 Right-click CHWS. In heating mode. and click Select. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. enter 18 GPM. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature.In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click OK. and click Column Settings. and click Properties. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . including the flow rate and size of the component. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you can view several parameters. 32 In the System Browser. expand Piping. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. for Water Flow.

Design is highlighted. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Training Files. 10 Click OK. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select CHWR.HVAC Plan . the boiler. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. click Check None. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 9 In the Select a System dialog. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).rvt. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . When you draw a box to select components. 5 In the Filter dialog. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.Mech 330). and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. then the Select a System dialog displays. A system preview displays in red. and click OK. you can place the cursor over a system component. select Mechanical Equipment. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.

verify that Solutions is selected. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . duct. click Settings. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. enter 1' 6''. structural beams. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. select Perimeter. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. or architectural components.11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Cancel. For Inset. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.

you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and press Tab 3 times. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the flow for one WSHP is 18. to display the path with thinner lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. and the flow for the other is 12. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. With each Tab.16 Click Finish Layout. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and access its instance properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 23 Under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and click OK. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler.

On the Options Bar. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Next. 28 In the Project Browser. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. click Edit System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . you physically close the CHWR loop. which propagates flow throughout the system. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Logically. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. 32 Click Finish Editing System.

select a WSHP. and click Cancel. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. 38 Using the same method. access its instance properties. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 35 Using the drag control. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. under Mechanical. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . as shown. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.

40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. enter 1' 6''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Inset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''. and then click OK. select CHWS. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.

(Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify. 47 In the drawing area. as shown.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. In a later exercise. as shown.

You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or manually modify the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. To create the piping system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.50 Using the same method. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and the return pipes are magenta. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ 3D Views.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. As you work in the training file.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. click Training Files.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler.

11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. 12 In the 3D view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the lower one is secondary. select the return pipe riser. and click OK. 13 In the plan view. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click Draw Pipe.

17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 2'. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 1' . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and you select 1 connector. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. for Offset.7''. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.In a plan view. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.

select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. As you place piping runs that are close together. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. as shown. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. 19 In the plan view. and select it.

and when the connector point displays. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. right-click the bottom connector. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click the minus symbol. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. 29 If necessary. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.

31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. right-click the discharge connector. and click Draw Pipe.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. enter 9' 6''. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. and click to create the pipe. for Offset.

Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.37 Click Modify. right-click.

47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that under Mechanical. select the cooling tower. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click OK. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 46 Press Esc. 48 In the plan view. Connect the cooling tower Next. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. view the properties for the secondary pump.50 or 50% of the Flow. the value is 0 GPM. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 44 In the 3D view. In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. 43 Press Esc. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. for Cooling Water Flow. under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Element Properties. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 40 Click Cancel. right-click. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 42 Click OK. as shown. under Mechanical.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet).

Adding Valves In this exercise. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. When the valve is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and close the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files. and is heated by the boiler.rvt. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water bypasses the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View.

6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves | 143 . and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view. The bypass valve is closed by default.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. as shown. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 4 On the Options Bar.

place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

verify that Flow is 0 GPM. 19 Using the same method. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click OK. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 20 Select the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click Element Properties. right-click. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. In heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 .

3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. click Training Files. as shown.rvt.HVAC Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.22 Using the method you just learned. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Initially. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Flow. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. for Schemes. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Size. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and enter 2. and for Velocity. Under Constraints. enter 5 FPS. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Click OK. for Branch Sizing. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.25 FT/100ft. 13 Press Esc. select Friction. and click to select the branch. Select And.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. pressure. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. or manually modify the pipe. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.Design ➤ 3D Views. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Using the System Inspector. Inspecting the System | 149 . Either relocate the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. click Training Files.rvt. Inspecting the System In this exercise.

flow. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. An inspection flag reports the section number. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required.

8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and to size pipe. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. inspect Section 6 again. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 10 Click Finish. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. targeting those systems that need attention.89 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. the Static Pressure is 7. and click OK.67 psi. select 90° F. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 9 Using the same method. for Fluid Temperature.88 psi. you need to validate them. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . as shown.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.

expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. 7 In the System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Show to view all of the system components. In the System Browser. For example. 9 Right-click CHWS. 6 In the Project Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and double-click Level 3 . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. As you learned when placing components. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you have assigned all components to systems. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the pipe is associated with that system. and for pipe sizing. After you assign components to a system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder.Design. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed.Design. thus assigning the components to a system. click Training Files. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 4 In the System Browser. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).HVAC Plan . Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Warnings display. double-click Level 1 . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. right-click the Systems titlebar. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click View. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 12 In the System Browser. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. click Close.HVAC Plan .TIP If you have multiple views open. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Expand All. expand the Unassigned folder. 13 Right-click CHWR. and confirm unassigned system components. otherwise.Design floor plan. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

speeding up the design phase. For Material. click Training Files. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. wiring. In this exercise you review electrical settings. You also add a wiring type. distribution systems. Select Correction Factor. enter 1. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring Types. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. expand Wiring . ■ ■ For Material. Click OK. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. select Copper.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select Copper. For Temperature. enter THHN. click (Open). select 90. ■ ■ For Factor.04.Wire Sizes. ■ Click New Correction Factor. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Temperature Rating. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 75.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc.■ ■ For Value. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK three times.

Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. power circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Then. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. 167 . Create power loads.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Use the System Browser to check your design.

168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.00 fc. select the color for Less Than 20. select the color legend. You can create additional color schemes. Click OK. In the Color dialog. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Orange. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.rvt.00 fc. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. By using orange as the color for this range. Under Scheme Definition. 2 In the drawing area. for Basic Colors. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . click Training Files. select Average Estimated Illumination. for the Spaces Category. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. which is the lowest value in the specified range. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. zoom to space Library 219.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.7 In the Project Browser. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range.277. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. 13 Click the Level 2 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 8 In the Project Browser. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. The red field will clear once the +/. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.

so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. select Multiple.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the fixtures will move accordingly. 20 Select the lighting fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 23 Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Click to place the fixture.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. select Multiple. 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

and for Category.277V.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . 36 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 42 In the drawing area. click the ceiling grid line as shown.277V. 41 On the Options Bar.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns.

In the next exercise. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .rvt. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . scroll to view space space Library 219. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 2 Tile the views as shown. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Lighting Color Fill plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.

In the Select File dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Type Mark. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity. enter . Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. for Apparent Load.277V and click OK. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Under Photometrics. and click OK. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.ies and click Open. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset.00 VA. In the Name dialog. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. enter . for Lamp. select 463T5_S. click the value for Initial Color. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.00 lm. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .85. select T5 [HO]. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply.93. Under Photometrics. select Luminous Flux. enter F15. Under Identity Data. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. specify 15000. Click OK. ■ Click OK twice.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. enter 162.

and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category.277V. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Press Delete. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Receptacles | 183 . and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the next exercise. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. and receptacles to your design.rvt. Junction Boxes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. junction boxes. you add switches. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click (Open). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Select Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.rfa and click Open. and Receptacles | 185 . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad.

Click OK twice. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 21 In the drawing area.Offset. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click Edit Type. for Mark. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. enter JB-1NL. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. zoom to space Library 219.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter 9’0”. In the Type Properties dialog.14 Press ESC to end the command. 15 Select the junction box. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Electrical. note the Number of Poles is 1. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Level 2 . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

26 In the System Browser. Placing Switches. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Receptacles | 187 . right-click and click Column Settings. Select Size.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space Name. Space Number. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Voltage. Expand General. Select Load. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Click OK. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 24 For any column. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 23 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes. NOTE If necessary. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Number of Elements. Distribution System. Expand Electrical.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall.

Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220.rvt. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 14 Select the panelboard. enter 20. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Surface: 100A. select 120/208 Wye.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. enter PP-2B. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

for Max. For Panel Name. click Check None. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. which is the logical connection between the elements.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. zoom to space Instruction 221. and for Category.Loads. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 20. Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 23 In the Filter dialog. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. #1 Pole Breakers.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 41 In the Filter dialog. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. select Wires. click (Open). Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. except without wire. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. enter 2. for Hot Conductors. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category.

2 In the drawing area. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. Voltage. Rating.rvt. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. expand Power. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Expand Electrical. Distribution System. and verify that Load. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. click Training Files. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. and then expand circuit 1. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 In the System Browser.

28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 30 Close the System Browser. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 22 With the junction box still selected. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. under Electrical. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. note the label parameters and click Cancel. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Yes. 47 In the drawing area. click below the first one to place it. click Edit Type. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. for Type Mark. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Identity Data. 44 In the Edit Label dialog.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Tags. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. enter FR4. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 40 Click OK twice. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.

select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply.rfa. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. click Check None. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. for File Name. Click OK. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 52 In the Save As dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. and click Apply. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Break. and for Category. Next you create a switch system. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 56 In the Filter dialog. enter a comma. Click Save. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Lighting Fixture Tags. For Circuit Number. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Deselect Break and for Suffix. Click OK.

under Electrical Lighting. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter a. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). click Training Files. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Click OK. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.rvt. for Switch ID. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i.

21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. under Electrical . Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Lighting. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. enter b.

and data systems. 2 In the drawing area. 7 In space Electrical 220. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Next you create a circuit and size wire. click (Open). Circuits are used for power.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 4 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Check None. select Electrical Fixtures. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. lighting. select the PP-2B panel. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

enter 2. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Electrical . and in the right pane. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. 19 Click OK. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.Loads. and click Open. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 13 Select the wire again. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Element Properties.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Wiring. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.rfa. Click OK.

and click to select the circuit. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 22 In space Electrical 220.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.

There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .26 Press Delete. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.

Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 3 In the Electrical space. select panel LP-2B. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Next you balance the loads for your design. click Training Files. click Open. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Finally. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.rvt.

Scroll down. 1-#12. Phase B 3636 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 6 Click OK.3712 VA. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. B.3616 VA). Notice that the loads on Phase A. Click OK. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 1-#12. 1-#10. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Rebalance Loads. 14 Close the warning dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. enter 30A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. and Phase C . 12 Select panel PP-2B.

for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. Next you create a panel schedule. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 17 Close the warning dialog. and click OK.Loads. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Click OK. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. click (Open). enter 30A. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.15 Select panel PP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.Loads. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Select PP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. under Electrical .rvt. enter 25A. for Rating. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical .

drag PP-2B onto the sheet. select Bold and Italic. Under Body Text. click Edit. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. for Font Size. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Appearance. click (Open). Under Header Text. 6 In the Project Browser. under Other. expand Sheets (all). and open E601 .rvt. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font Size. 4 Close the report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click OK twice. for Font. enter 1/8.Panel Schedules. 7 Select the schedule. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 5 In the Project Browser. select Berlin Sans FB. Under Header Text. enter 3/32. click Training Files. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. In the System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Expand Unassigned. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. In the System Browser. press TAB once. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. select space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Checking Your Design | 215 . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. select MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. under Warnings.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Adding a pipe size. and click Properties. planning is critical to a successful design.Sanitary. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. click Training Files. In this exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.rvt. in addition to loading existing families. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog.Design is open. type PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. right-click PVC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan .Vent. 219 . and verify that Level 1 . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. you create a PVC pipe type.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and click Main.Sch 40 . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Tee.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV: Standard.DWV: Standard. enter 10°. for Material. 26 Click OK. PVC .Vent is listed. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . In the Project Browser.PVC . enter 5/8''. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select None. enter 27/32''. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 13 In the right panel. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 18 For System Type. enter -4' . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. For Offset. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Tap. click Training Files. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . for Nominal.Sch 40 . under Pipe Types. 10 On the Selection panel. 25 For Outside. 15 For System Type. click Pipe Settings. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.PVC . 22 Click New Size. select Sanitary. 24 For Inside Diameter. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. under Mechanical.rfa. 17 In the left pane.Sch 40 .PVC . click Modify. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. and click OK.0''. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Tee. select Sanitary. 6 Click OK. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plastic.DWV. enter 1/2''. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee Vent . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Cross. 27 For the new pipe size. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 21 In the right pane. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. and hot and cold water piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. 221 . Create the cold water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. sanitary piping.

1 urinal.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. you add 2 toilets. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . including the men’s room (space Male 107). and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. and verify that Level 1 . as shown. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

5 On the Placement panel. against the left wall. and 3 sinks. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 4 On the Element panel.1.6 gpf. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. select Public . 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Flush Valve . under Water Closet . in the Type Selector. as shown. 1 wall-mounted urinal.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Wall Mounted. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.

) 8 Press Esc. under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. zoom in closer.Wall Hung.7 Click to place another toilet. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. (Again. and press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.

14 Click Modify.2'' Drain. click Place on Face. In placing the fixture.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 12 On the Placement panel.Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . under Floor Drain .

right-click in the System Browser table heading.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and click View ➤ Piping. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and review the components listed under this system. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and a floor drain. a urinal. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. click Training Files. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). In this exercise.

draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and verify that Level 1 . clear Lines (<Overhead>). 6 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.Design is open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

enter Sanitary 107. 11 On the Options Bar. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. click Finish Editing System. If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 12 On the Edit System panel. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 In the Systems Browser. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. expand Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. for System Name. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example.

and modify it to meet project requirements. for Slope. 23 For Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select Branch. select Main. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 27 Click Modify. for Solution Type. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select 4''.19 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and for Offset. 25 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter -4'-0”. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click Settings. The default settings are automatically modified. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 24 In the left pane. click Solutions. You accept this suggested solution. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Diameter. enter -1' 0''. select Intersections. enter -1' 0''.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view.30 In the 3D view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel. 5 On the Placement panel.Design is open. select 22''x22'' . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . under Lavatory .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Rectangular.Public. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans. as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.

select Multiple. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. TIP When entering dimensions. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 2' 4''. For example.7 Click Modify.

Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Finish Editing System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 12 In the drawing area.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 11 In the System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. click Add To System. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 16 On the Edit System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 15 Click the 3 sinks.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 20 Select the fitting.In the System Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 19 In the 3D view. with the tee fitting selected.Design ➤ 3D Views. double-click 3D Plumbing. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . 21 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 22 In the plan view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.

27 Click Modify. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Slope. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 2' . and click Apply.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar.6''. and click to draw the pipe. for Offset. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. In this example. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.

DWV. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. 31 Click Modify. select Standard. 30 In the 3D view. click to place the fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC .Sch 40 .

36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. In the next steps. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the right connector. 37 Select the fitting. enter 1'. and click Draw Pipe. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 34 Press Esc.33 With the fitting selected. you add pipe segments to the double wye. zoom in to the double wye fitting. for Offset. on the Options Bar. enter 6''. and press Enter.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. as shown.

and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. 48 Click Modify. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select Standard. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.PVC .DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 51 In the Type Selector. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 55 In the 3D view. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.Sch 40 . 56 Using the same method. 52 In the plan view. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. under Trap P . select the P-Trap on the left. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 53 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. In the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Move the cursor to the left. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. select the left P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe.

select the section of pipe you just drew. under Pipe Types. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Press Esc.■ In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel.

click Finish. for Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 62 On the Options Bar. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Training Files. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.

Plumbing Plan . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Overall.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.DWV. select Standard. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown. 3 In the Section view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Design. right-click the top connector. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click to draw the pipe.Floor level line. 9 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design. and click Draw Pipe.Sch 40 . 5 Select the tee. 7 On the Selection panel. click Modify. select the vertical stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 10 In the 3D view.PVC . select the elbow fitting on the right.

under Plug . 12 Select the fitting. for Offset. 17 In the Type Selector. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.DWV. 18 In the plan view. select Standard. enter 1'-0”. 15 Press Esc.PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once.Sch 40 . 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the rotate control to change the orientation.11 Click Modify.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.19 Click Modify. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.

7 In the left pane.) 10 Click OK. 6 In the left pane. For Offset. and for System Type. urinal. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Domestic Cold Water. select Domestic Hot Water. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Branch. select Pipe Types: Water. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 In the right pane. select Main. select Domestic Hot Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. for System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the Filter dialog. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Plumbing Fixtures. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click OK. 15 In the plan view. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and sinks. for System Type. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. expand Unassigned. 9 In the left pane.Overall. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. For Offset. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 14 In the System Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. under Design ➤ Plumbing . if necessary. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 9' 3''. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click Main. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Pipe Types: Water.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Branch. click Check None. minimize the Sanitary system.

Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. For Flow Conversion Method. enter DCW 107. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 19 On the System Tools panel. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. In the System Browser. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Edit System. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and click to place the pipe. For Offset. and click Draw Pipe. select Water. and click the connector. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. select the sink above the urinal. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. for Offset. enter 10'. 31 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. 34 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 0”/12”. click to the left of the urinal. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the second toilet. under Pipe Types. 33 Click Modify. and press Enter. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. enter 7''. 30 In the plan view. right-click the top DCW connector. 35 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Type Selector. select 3/4''.2 7/8''. For Slope. enter 3' .25 Using the same method. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 32 Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. as shown. and press Enter. enter 4'0”. as shown. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.

and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).39 Move the cursor to the left. 40 Click Modify. 41 Select the top sink. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 42 In the Select Connector dialog.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. add a water heater. you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Plumbing Plan . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. select the 3 sinks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. while pressing Ctrl.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. and verify that Level 1 . expand the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design is open.Overall. 6 In the plan view. click Training Files.

When designing systems.Tankless. 12 In the Type Selector.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Default Domestic Hot Water. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.6 Gallon. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In later steps. and click Edit System.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. in the Unassigned folder. verify that DCW 107 is selected. under Water Heater . Default Domestic Cold Water. 13 In the plan view. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. select 0. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. you edit the system to add equipment. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 14 Click Modify. as shown. and click OK. 10 In the System Browser. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 15 In the System Browser. for System Name.

and select Draw Pipe. select the water heater. Slope: 0''/12''. for Offset. and click the water main line.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 25 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the water heater. enter 10’. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. as shown. 24 Move the cursor up. right-click the middle left connector. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and on the Edit System panel. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 22 In the Type Selector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. Offset: 4' 6''. enter 1' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view.

and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 30 On the System Tools panel. 37 On the Options Bar. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. enter 9' 0''. 35 On the Options Bar. as shown. 33 On the Edit System panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1''. click Finish Editing System. click Edit System. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. for Offset. select 4'-6''. and in the System Selector. enter 1' 6''. 36 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. and for Offset. for Diameter. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click Draw Pipe.

enter 1’. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down. for Offset. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar. and click just above the bottom sink. and press Enter. enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down.

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 .

266 .

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. In this tutorial. 267 . To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise. 2 Right-click Standard. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. However. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. and click Duplicate. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. go to http://www.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. You create a new pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the tutorial training files are not present.autodesk. you can choose to save your work. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.

3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For System Type. or architectural components. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. under Mechanical. and then click OK. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. select Carbon Steel. For Offset. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Main. and click Properties. select Fire Protection Wet. However. Next. click Rename. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Pipe Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. you create project parameters and work with schedules. structural beams. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. In the next exercise. In this exercise. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. 9 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that 9' 0" is selected. for Material. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. duct. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For System Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 6 In the Project Browser. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2.

4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 8 Using a crossing window. select Spaces. right-click. the space crossing lines display. for Sprinkler Zone. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Zone 1. select the upper half of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 In the drawing area.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . For Group parameter under. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and then click OK.Design is highlighted. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Add. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. under Fire Protection. enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice. and click Element Properties. indicating that it’s the active view. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select space Instruction 221 as shown. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Under Categories.

click Training Files.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. including a calculated value parameter. for Sprinkler Zone. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. you create schedules for sprinkler design. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. and then access instance properties. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Fire Protection. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. to which you add various parameters. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. 13 Using the same method. 10 In the Filter dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Obstructed-Combustible. select Length.Fire Protection Plan . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. In the Maximum Spacing column. 10 In the Format dialog. Click OK.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. and on the ribbon. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Feet and fractional inches. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Name. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. click the Formatting tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Maximum Spacing. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Rounding. Select Schedule keys. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. For Type of Parameter. For Group parameter under. select Spaces. select To the nearest 1'. 14 Select the new header. double-click on each column separator. and click Field Format. 11 Click OK twice. for Name. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . enter Protection Area Construction Type. enter 15. 9 On the Formatting tab. For Key name. click Add Parameter. indicating that it’s the active view. select Fire Protection. For Units.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 6 Using the same method. enter Maximum Spacing. Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Light.

Click OK. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. select Spaces. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Ordinary. enter 130. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and press Enter.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Extra. under Available fields. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.

For Type. click Edit. For Formula. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select 0 decimal place. select Number. 22 Click OK twice. Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. enter Minimum Sprinklers. for Sorting/Grouping. select Sprinkler Zone. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Units. select Area. select Level. under Other. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Then by. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. In the Fields dialog. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Sort by. For Rounding. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Common. and click OK. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click Field Format. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Click OK. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. select Fixed. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click . and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 19 Click the Formatting tab.

for Filter. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 27 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. select Sprinkler Zone. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. Under Field formatting. For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. for Filter by. ■ In the Format dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by (second instance). select Level equals Level 2. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Field Format.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Level. select Number. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and then select Hidden field. 30 Click OK twice. select Hidden field.

double-click Type. For Category. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Fields. and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. for Embedded Schedule. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Embedded Schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Sprinklers. and select Totals only. 33 Click in the grouped header cell.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Calculate totals. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. System Name. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. delete the word Maximum. Under Field formatting. select Count. click Edit. select Grand totals. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . On the Formatting tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Available fields.

Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and the spacing parameter values are evident. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. double-click FP . you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. As a result. 46 With the space still selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Unobstructed. but their values are not determined. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan Design. 43 Click Cancel. 48 In the floor plan. select space 221 Instruction. 52 Click OK. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click OK. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. under Identity Data. select Ordinary.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. click Training Files.rvt. and double-click Level 2 . As you place the sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the system. go to http://www. 279 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. By following the recommended workflow. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. However.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. After finishing each exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you will understand the process. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. methodology. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. At the end of this tutorial.

When there is a small misalignment. When this happens. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.

select the sprinklers that you placed. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 9 In space Instruction 202. as shown. 10 Press Esc twice. while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Pendent .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. and select Sprinkler .

Next. Also. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and then press Esc.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you place non-hosted sprinklers. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

29 Press Esc. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. For Number. Notice that the schedule updates. move the cursor to the right. 17 In the Project Browser. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Next. enter 14' 6". it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and 200C). zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. enter 11. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 10' 6".Fire Protection Plan .FP_Ceiling view. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This number is determined in the schedule. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . for Offset. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 200B. and press Enter. 18 Type WT. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. open Design ➤ FP . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 25 Click OK. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and click Element Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. specify a vertical offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. under Constraints. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Design. you adjust the offset. 19 In the floor plan.

However. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and with piping (physical connection).30 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.Design is highlighted. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . After creating the logical connection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. Unlike logical connections (systems). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In the next exercise. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.rvt. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).

In the System Browser. and select Piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. click View ➤ Systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. as shown. within the Piping Systems folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 5 Right-click the header.

Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. press Tab.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 15 In the drawing area. 13 In the System Browser. and select the system. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. verify that Main is selected.Wet is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. system equipment. verify that 9' 0" is specified. click Settings. select Branch. and a piping layout preview displays. 11 With the system still selected. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 19 Click OK. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. select an initial piping layout. and on the Options Bar. For Pipe Type. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. 14 Click Finish Editing System. The Edit Piping System panel displays. The Generate Layout tools are activated. for System Name. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Next. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. place the cursor over a sprinkler. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Select. indicating the logical connection. providing system editing tools. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. In the left pane. and number of elements in the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

and select solution 5. click Solutions. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 .20 On the Generate Layout panel. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. enter -12' 0". 22 On the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 23 For Offset. select 2". these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). as shown. for Diameter. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. In general. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. When the layout is finished. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. click Place Base. and green represents branch lines).

click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and various manual pipe creation tools. or that offset elevations are incorrect. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Next. Either relocate the system components. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. and then you create piping to physically connect them. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 32 If necessary. the Connect Into tool.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . and select the elbow fitting as shown. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Network is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. or a system component to display system tools. and select solution 5. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for Solution Type. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. verify that Solutions is selected. radiators. 9 On the Edit System panel. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. and so on) are logically connected by a system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 14 Close the System Browser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 8 In the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. you can select the pipe or duct. air terminals. 12 On the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. and pipe or duct is created. click Add To System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.

and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 24 In the Piping Plan. 27 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the views. 21 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc. 28 In the drawing area. 25 Select the sprinkler.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and click Draw Pipe. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 23 View the result in the 3D view. for Offset. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. select 9'. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. right-click. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 29 Using the same method. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.

31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Because the whole system highlights.

double-click on the section head to open the section view.rvt. click Training Files. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. ■ 6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. select 1/4" = 1'-0". In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale.Fire Protection Plan . 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. select 4".

change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. The pipe diameter is modified. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and maximize the floor plan.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 1 1/4". 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Using the same method. as shown.

use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you created a wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. For additional practice. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this exercise.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

and click Properties. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view references. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. dependent views. right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. If the view included detail graphics. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. matchlines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Copy of Level 1. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and apply a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click Rename.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. click Training Files. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.

Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. views and put them on the sheet. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Using the same method. and then press Esc. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. as shown. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Rename.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 3 In the Rename View dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click OK. more focused. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. and click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view.

In the Color dialog. and then press Esc. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 20 Select the upper view reference and. select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Weight. Click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. 14 Click Finish Matchline. on the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. select black. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. for Target view. For Line Pattern. select 11. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference./ ---). 19 In the drawing area. click the current value. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as .

and zoom to each of the view references. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 25 Using the same method.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Graphics. select Documentation. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water. For Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click Apply Default View Template. 2 Zoom in. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.29 Close the file with or without saving it. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. select Plumbing Isometric. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and select the section box. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. right-click 3D Plumbing.Domestic Water. and click to select it. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. click Training Files. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. For Sub-Discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. for View Name. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Click OK. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and click Properties. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. select Plumbing. for View Classification.

12 Using the same method. select 3. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select Dash. Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.9 Right-click. For Pattern. and then click OK. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. press Tab 3 times. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown). and click to select it. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.Domestic Water view with detailing. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. press Tab 3 times. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. In the drawing area. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. click Reveal Hidden Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. Right-click.Sanitary Waste. and click to select it. 18 Using methods learned previously. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and click to place the spot slope annotation. click on the Format value. For Slope. for Rounding. 25 Press Esc twice.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Common is selected. When the view is associated with a sheet. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. select To the nearest 1/8". 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. as shown. 21 Click OK twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Creating Callout Views | 315 .

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. click Training Files. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).rvt. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. for Scale. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 13 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select 5. for Line Weight. drag it to the sheet. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all). double-click M601 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and select the viewport. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. right-click the callout view. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. for View Name. and click Apply Default View Template.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 25 In the Project Browser. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. 26 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. right-click the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. ■ work with model-based components. symbols. 321 . linetypes. duct tags. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend.

7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 With the text still selected.rvt. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). click Training Files.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

16 In the drawing area. select a supply diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box.9 Press Esc twice. a return diffuser. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 323 . 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. and a segment of rectangular duct.

23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. for Ducts. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. If necessary. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. under Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Open. 22 In the Tags dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.rfa. and click OK.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

and Attached End. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . Leader.25 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select Horizontal. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 31 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. as shown. for Leader. select Free End.

select Dot Open 1/16". and lock lighting fixtures. and click OK. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and all elements of that type are affected. you use temporary dimensions to locate. for Leader Arrowhead. select the last tag placed. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. That’s because you changed a type property. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously.36 Press Esc twice. lay out. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 37 In the drawing area. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

4 Using the Move Witness Line control. On the Options Bar. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and then select the interior face of the wall. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the dimension line. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 12 Press Esc. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.

3 1/2"). Creating a Legend In this exercise. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend | 329 . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and notes. click the 3 interior locks on the line. enter 8'. annotation symbols. 19 Using the same methods. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 16 Press Esc. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. and offset them 8' from the wall.13 Using the same method. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework. Because the dimensions are locked.

2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.8 Neck. 10 Using the same method. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click below the title to place the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. Click OK. select Floor Plan. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .rvt. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. For Scale. select 1/4" = 1' -0". For View. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Training Files. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

Creating a Legend | 331 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser.

and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. and then press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. The selected detail lines are now thin. 24 Select the component’s break line. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 26 Press Esc.

mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Creating a Legend | 333 .30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify. 34 Using the method learned previously. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. enter E. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.

40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected.

click Training Files. A detail callout that references another view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. detail groups.113 East elevation view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and text. 335 . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.rvt. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

and click to place it.113 East on the sheet. 8 Using the same method. 5 In the drawing area. and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser . Next. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select each of the 2 panelboards. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.

and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Activate View. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . under Identity Data. select the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. right-click. for Title on Sheet. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Deactivate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.

right-click. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the drag control. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. right-click. and click Activate View. as shown. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Press Esc. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. In the next exercise. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. you add wiring to the diagram.

Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . select 6. In the Line Styles dialog. and click OK. Under Modify Subcategories. expand Lines. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). enter Electrical Power. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Chain is selected. 8 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. As you draw. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. notice that there are no snaps active. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.113 North view. as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Name.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the New Subcategory dialog. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. click Training Files. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. for Line Weight.

11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 1/8".

so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 29 Click Modify. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 28 Click above the cap.

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . You enter exact values for each line length. and then press Esc. enter 3/32". 40 Press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right.5. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 0 0. for Offset. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 42 On the Options Bar.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. expand Groups ➤ Detail. while pressing Ctrl. Using the same method. 47 In the drawing area. 46 In the Project Browser. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 50 With the group selected. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. and click OK. enter Ground. select all 3 lines.25. and then press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.125. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and press Enter. for Name. enter 0 0. click on the length dimension value. you can ensure that they stay together. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 52 Select the detail group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 54 Select the group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point.

for Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Rename. 5 Zoom in to view the section. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. click Training Files. In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. click Home. and then click the corner where the Top. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Back. and then press Esc. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge.

and click Apply View Template. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 3D HVAC Iso. Walkthroughs. right-click. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D Views.

Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left. 15 Using the same method. (Right). as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 19 Complete the text labels.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .

and under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. 23 Click on the crop region. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.To rotate and reposition a text label. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. under Extents. 25 Click OK. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible.

3 In the Project Browser. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. select 3" = 1'-0". and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.29 In the drawing area. right-click the view name. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Scale. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View.rvt. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Click OK. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select the isometric view. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Place a detail component. and click Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.

Click OK. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 13 In the drawing area. click the point at the top of the drain. For View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as shown. 9 Zoom in to the component. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Plumbing. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Sub-Discipline. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Documentation. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 12 On the Element panel. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as the rectangle start point.

click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select C. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Concrete. 22 Click Modify. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. select the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.I. and then press Esc.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 20 Select 1. 21 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. (Line). 23 In the drawing area. and click OK. for Type. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.P. 18 With the filled region still selected. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. select Multiple. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 31 On the Options Bar.28 Click Modify.

45 Using the method learned previously. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. as shown. 40 Click Finish Region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. (Rectangle). Drafting Detail Components | 357 . draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out.

51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. enter Flashing Membrane_F.D.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. draw wide detail lines as shown. and then click to select them. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog. for Name. press Tab to highlight the chain. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. select the Flashing Membrane group.

Drafting Detail Components | 359 . add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 61 Using the same method. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 67 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 71 Click Modify.62 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

81 Select the text note. 76 To select the leader start point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 80 Press Esc twice. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and click to place it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and then press Esc twice. open P103 . select the view title. 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.

and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select 3. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For A-----NPP. For Import units. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select Visible. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For Colors. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Black and White. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. For Layers. for Line Weight. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.rvt. Click Open. click Training Files. select Auto-Detect. you import a CAD detail drawing.dwg. Click OK. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise.

13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. open P103 . 11 Press Esc. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. select the viewport title. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 12 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.8 Type ZF. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful